Network Working Group T. Berners-Lee Request for Comments: 1866 MIT/W3C Category: Standards Track D. Connolly November 1995 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 Status of this Memo This document specifies an Internet standards track protocol for the Internet community, and requests discussion and suggestions for improvements. Please refer to the current edition of the "Internet Official Protocol Standards" (STD 1) for the standardization state and status of this protocol. Distribution of this memo is unlimited. Abstract The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is a simple markup language used to create hypertext documents that are platform independent. HTML documents are SGML documents with generic semantics that are appropriate for representing information from a wide range of domains. HTML markup can represent hypertext news, mail, documentation, and hypermedia; menus of options; database query results; simple structured documents with in-lined graphics; and hypertext views of existing bodies of information. HTML has been in use by the World Wide Web (WWW) global information initiative since 1990. This specification roughly corresponds to the capabilities of HTML in common use prior to June 1994. HTML is an application of ISO Standard 8879:1986 Information Processing Text and Office Systems; Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). The "text/html" Internet Media Type (RFC 1590) and MIME Content Type (RFC 1521) is defined by this specification. Table of Contents 1. Introduction ........................................... 2 1.1 Scope .................................................. 3 1.2 Conformance ............................................ 3 2. Terms .................................................. 6 3. HTML as an Application of SGML .........................10 3.1 SGML Documents .........................................10 3.2 HTML Lexical Syntax ................................... 12 3.3 HTML Public Text Identifiers .......................... 17 3.4 Example HTML Document ................................. 17 4. HTML as an Internet Media Type ........................ 18 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 1] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 4.1 text/html media type .................................. 18 4.2 HTML Document Representation .......................... 19 5. Document Structure .................................... 20 5.1 Document Element: HTML ................................ 21 5.2 Head: HEAD ............................................ 21 5.3 Body: BODY ............................................ 24 5.4 Headings: H1 ... H6 ................................... 24 5.5 Block Structuring Elements ............................ 25 5.6 List Elements ......................................... 28 5.7 Phrase Markup ......................................... 30 5.8 Line Break: BR ........................................ 34 5.9 Horizontal Rule: HR ................................... 34 5.10 Image: IMG ............................................ 34 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs ..................... 35 6.1 The HTML Document Character Set ....................... 36 7. Hyperlinks ............................................ 36 7.1 Accessing Resources ................................... 37 7.2 Activation of Hyperlinks .............................. 38 7.3 Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources .......... 38 7.4 Fragment Identifiers .................................. 38 7.5 Queries and Indexes ................................... 39 7.6 Image Maps ............................................ 39 8. Forms ................................................. 40 8.1 Form Elements ......................................... 40 8.2 Form Submission ....................................... 45 9. HTML Public Text ...................................... 49 9.1 HTML DTD .............................................. 49 9.2 Strict HTML DTD ....................................... 61 9.3 Level 1 HTML DTD ...................................... 62 9.4 Strict Level 1 HTML DTD ............................... 63 9.5 SGML Declaration for HTML ............................. 64 9.6 Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML .............. 65 9.7 Character Entity Sets ................................. 66 10. Security Considerations ............................... 69 11. References ............................................ 69 12. Acknowledgments ....................................... 71 12.1 Authors' Addresses .................................... 71 13. The HTML Coded Character Set .......................... 72 14. Proposed Entities ..................................... 75 1. Introduction The HyperText Markup Language (HTML) is a simple data format used to create hypertext documents that are portable from one platform to another. HTML documents are SGML documents with generic semantics that are appropriate for representing information from a wide range of domains. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 2] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 As HTML is an application of SGML, this specification assumes a working knowledge of [SGML]. 1.1. Scope HTML has been in use by the World-Wide Web (WWW) global information initiative since 1990. Previously, informal documentation on HTML has been available from a number of sources on the Internet. This specification brings together, clarifies, and formalizes a set of features that roughly corresponds to the capabilities of HTML in common use prior to June 1994. A number of new features to HTML are being proposed and experimented in the Internet community. This document thus defines a HTML 2.0 (to distinguish it from the previous informal specifications). Future (generally upwardly compatible) versions of HTML with new features will be released with higher version numbers. HTML is an application of ISO Standard 8879:1986, "Information Processing Text and Office Systems; Standard Generalized Markup Language" (SGML). The HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) is a formal definition of the HTML syntax in terms of SGML. This specification also defines HTML as an Internet Media Type[IMEDIA] and MIME Content Type[MIME] called `text/html'. As such, it defines the semantics of the HTML syntax and how that syntax should be interpreted by user agents. 1.2. Conformance This specification governs the syntax of HTML documents and aspects of the behavior of HTML user agents. 1.2.1. Documents A document is a conforming HTML document if: * It is a conforming SGML document, and it conforms to the HTML DTD (see 9.1, "HTML DTD"). NOTE - There are a number of syntactic idioms that are not supported or are supported inconsistently in some historical user agent implementations. These idioms are identified in notes like this throughout this specification. * It conforms to the application conventions in this specification. For example, the value of the HREF attribute Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 3] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 of the element must conform to the URI syntax. * Its document character set includes [ISO-8859-1] and agrees with [ISO-10646]; that is, each code position listed in 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" is included, and each code position in the document character set is mapped to the same character as [ISO-10646] designates for that code position. NOTE - The document character set is somewhat independent of the character encoding scheme used to represent a document. For example, the `ISO-2022-JP' character encoding scheme can be used for HTML documents, since its repertoire is a subset of the [ISO-10646] repertoire. The critical distinction is that numeric character references agree with [ISO-10646] regardless of how the document is encoded. 1.2.2. Feature Test Entities The HTML DTD defines a standard HTML document type and several variations, by way of feature test entities. Feature test entities are declarations in the HTML DTD that control the inclusion or exclusion of portions of the DTD. HTML.Recommended Certain features of the language are necessary for compatibility with widespread usage, but they may compromise the structural integrity of a document. This feature test entity selects a more prescriptive document type definition that eliminates those features. It is set to `IGNORE' by default. For example, in order to preserve the structure of a document, an editing user agent may translate HTML documents to the recommended subset, or it may require that the documents be in the recommended subset for import. HTML.Deprecated Certain features of the language are necessary for compatibility with earlier versions of the specification, but they tend to be used and implemented inconsistently, and their use is deprecated. This feature test entity enables a document type definition that allows these features. It is set to `INCLUDE' by default. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 4] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Documents generated by translation software or editing software should not contain deprecated idioms. 1.2.3. User Agents An HTML user agent conforms to this specification if: * It parses the characters of an HTML document into data characters and markup according to [SGML]. NOTE - In the interest of robustness and extensibility, there are a number of widely deployed conventions for handling non-conforming documents. See 4.2.1, "Undeclared Markup Error Handling" for details. * It supports the `ISO-8859-1' character encoding scheme and processes each character in the ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1 as specified in 6.1, "The HTML Document Character Set". NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, HTML user agents are encouraged to support `ISO-10646-UCS-2' or similar character encoding schemes and as much of the character repertoire of [ISO-10646] as is practical. * It behaves identically for documents whose parsed token sequences are identical. For example, comments and the whitespace in tags disappear during tokenization, and hence they do not influence the behavior of conforming user agents. * It allows the user to traverse (or at least attempt to traverse, resources permitting) all hyperlinks from elements in an HTML document. An HTML user agent is a level 2 user agent if, additionally: * It allows the user to express all form field values specified in an HTML document and to (attempt to) submit the values as requests to information services. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 5] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 2. Terms absolute URI a URI in absolute form; for example, as per [URL] anchor one of two ends of a hyperlink; typically, a phrase marked as an element. base URI an absolute URI used in combination with a relative URI to determine another absolute URI. character An atom of information, for example a letter or a digit. Graphic characters have associated glyphs, whereas control characters have associated processing semantics. character encoding scheme A function whose domain is the set of sequences of octets, and whose range is the set of sequences of characters from a character repertoire; that is, a sequence of octets and a character encoding scheme determines a sequence of characters. character repertoire A finite set of characters; e.g. the range of a coded character set. code position An integer. A coded character set and a code position from its domain determine a character. coded character set A function whose domain is a subset of the integers and whose range is a character repertoire. That is, for some set of integers (usually of the form {0, 1, 2, ..., N} ), a coded character set and an integer in that set determine a character. Conversely, a character and a coded character set determine the character's code position (or, in rare cases, a few code positions). conforming HTML user agent A user agent that conforms to this specification in its processing of the Internet Media Type `text/html'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 6] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data character Characters other than markup, which make up the content of elements. document character set a coded character set whose range includes all characters used in a document. Every SGML document has exactly one document character set. Numeric character references are resolved via the document character set. DTD document type definition. Rules that apply SGML to the markup of documents of a particular type, including a set of element and entity declarations. [SGML] element A component of the hierarchical structure defined by a document type definition; it is identified in a document instance by descriptive markup, usually a start-tag and end-tag. [SGML] end-tag Descriptive markup that identifies the end of an element. [SGML] entity data with an associated notation or interpretation; for example, a sequence of octets associated with an Internet Media Type. [SGML] fragment identifier the portion of an HREF attribute value following the `#' character which modifies the presentation of the destination of a hyperlink. form data set a sequence of name/value pairs; the names are given by an HTML document and the values are given by a user. HTML document An SGML document conforming to this document type definition. hyperlink a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail. The link goes from the tail to the head. The head and tail are also known as destination and source, respectively. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 7] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 markup Syntactically delimited characters added to the data of a document to represent its structure. There are four different kinds of markup: descriptive markup (tags), references, markup declarations, and processing instructions. [SGML] may A document or user interface is conforming whether this statement applies or not. media type an Internet Media Type, as per [IMEDIA]. message entity a head and body. The head is a collection of name/value fields, and the body is a sequence of octets. The head defines the content type and content transfer encoding of the body. [MIME] minimally conforming HTML user agent A user agent that conforms to this specification except for form processing. It may only process level 1 HTML documents. must Documents or user agents in conflict with this statement are not conforming. numeric character reference markup that refers to a character by its code position in the document character set. SGML document A sequence of characters organized physically as a set of entities and logically into a hierarchy of elements. An SGML document consists of data characters and markup; the markup describes the structure of the information and an instance of that structure. [SGML] shall If a document or user agent conflicts with this statement, it does not conform to this specification. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 8] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 should If a document or user agent conflicts with this statement, undesirable results may occur in practice even though it conforms to this specification. start-tag Descriptive markup that identifies the start of an element and specifies its generic identifier and attributes. [SGML] syntax-reference character set A coded character set whose range includes all characters used for markup; e.g. name characters and delimiter characters. tag Markup that delimits an element. A tag includes a name which refers to an element declaration in the DTD, and may include attributes. [SGML] text entity A finite sequence of characters. A text entity typically takes the form of a sequence of octets with some associated character encoding scheme, transmitted over the network or stored in a file. [SGML] typical Typical processing is described for many elements. This is not a mandatory part of the specification but is given as guidance for designers and to help explain the uses for which the elements were intended. URI A Uniform Resource Identifier is a formatted string that serves as an identifier for a resource, typically on the Internet. URIs are used in HTML to identify the anchors of hyperlinks. URIs in common practice include Uniform Resource Locators (URLs)[URL] and Relative URLs [RELURL]. user agent A component of a distributed system that presents an interface and processes requests on behalf of a user; for example, a www browser or a mail user agent. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 9] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 WWW The World-Wide Web is a hypertext-based, distributed information system created by researchers at CERN in Switzerland. 3. HTML as an Application of SGML HTML is an application of ISO 8879:1986 -- Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). SGML is a system for defining structured document types and markup languages to represent instances of those document types[SGML]. The public text -- DTD and SGML declaration -- of the HTML document type definition are provided in 9, "HTML Public Text". The term "HTML" refers to both the document type defined here and the markup language for representing instances of this document type. 3.1. SGML Documents An HTML document is an SGML document; that is, a sequence of characters organized physically into a set of entities, and logically as a hierarchy of elements. In the SGML specification, the first production of the SGML syntax grammar separates an SGML document into three parts: an SGML declaration, a prologue, and an instance. For the purposes of this specification, the prologue is a DTD. This DTD describes another grammar: the start symbol is given in the doctype declaration, the terminals are data characters and tags, and the productions are determined by the element declarations. The instance must conform to the DTD, that is, it must be in the language defined by this grammar. The SGML declaration determines the lexicon of the grammar. It specifies the document character set, which determines a character repertoire that contains all characters that occur in all text entities in the document, and the code positions associated with those characters. The SGML declaration also specifies the syntax-reference character set of the document, and a few other parameters that bind the abstract syntax of SGML to a concrete syntax. This concrete syntax determines how the sequence of characters of the document is mapped to a sequence of terminals in the grammar of the prologue. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 10] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 For example, consider the following document: Parsing Example Some text. *wow* An HTML user agent should use the SGML declaration that is given in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". According to its document character set, `*' refers to an asterisk character, `*'. The instance above is regarded as the following sequence of terminals: 1. start-tag: TITLE 2. data characters: "Parsing Example" 3. end-tag: TITLE 4. start-tag: P 5. data characters "Some text." 6. start-tag: EM 7. data characters: "*wow*" 8. end-tag: EM 9. end-tag: P Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 11] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The start symbol of the DTD grammar is HTML, and the productions are given in the public text identified by `-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN' (9.1, "HTML DTD"). The terminals above parse as: HTML | \-HEAD | | | \-TITLE | | | \- | | | \-"Parsing Example" | | | \- | \-BODY | \-P | \- | \-"Some text. " | \-EM | | | \- | | | \-"*wow*" | | | \- | \- Some of the elements are delimited explicitly by tags, while the boundaries of others are inferred. The element contains a element and a element. The contains , which is explicitly delimited by start- and end-tags. 3.2. HTML Lexical Syntax SGML specifies an abstract syntax and a reference concrete syntax. Aside from certain quantities and capacities (e.g. the limit on the length of a name), all HTML documents use the reference concrete syntax. In particular, all markup characters are in the repertoire of [ISO-646]. Data characters are drawn from the document character set (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 12] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A complete discussion of SGML parsing, e.g. the mapping of a sequence of characters to a sequence of tags and data, is left to the SGML standard[SGML]. This section is only a summary. 3.2.1. Data Characters Any sequence of characters that do not constitute markup (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]) are mapped directly to strings of data characters. Some markup also maps to data character strings. Numeric character references map to single-character strings, via the document character set. Each reference to one of the general entities defined in the HTML DTD maps to a single-character string. For example, abc<def => "abc","<","def" abc<def => "abc","<","def" The terminating semicolon on entity or numeric character references is only necessary when the character following the reference would otherwise be recognized as part of the name (see 9.4.5 "Reference End" in [SGML]). abc < def => "abc ","<"," def" abc < def => "abc ","<"," def" An ampersand is only recognized as markup when it is followed by a letter or a `#' and a digit: abc & lt def => "abc & lt def" abc 60 def => "abc 60 def" A useful technique for translating plain text to HTML is to replace each '<', '&', and '>' by an entity reference or numeric character reference as follows: ENTITY NUMERIC CHARACTER REFERENCE CHAR REF CHARACTER DESCRIPTION --------- ---------- ----------- --------------------- & & & Ampersand < < < Less than > > > Greater than NOTE - There are SGML mechanisms, CDATA and RCDATA declared content, that allow most `<', `>', and `&' characters to be entered without the use of entity references. Because these mechanisms tend to be used and implemented inconsistently, and because they conflict Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 13] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 with techniques for reducing HTML to 7 bit ASCII for transport, they are deprecated in this version of HTML. See 5.5.2.1, "Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING". 3.2.2. Tags Tags delimit elements such as headings, paragraphs, lists, character highlighting, and links. Most HTML elements are identified in a document as a start-tag, which gives the element name and attributes, followed by the content, followed by the end tag. Start-tags are delimited by `<' and `>'; end tags are delimited by `' and `>'. An example is: This is a Heading Some elements only have a start-tag without an end-tag. For example, to create a line break, use the `' tag. Additionally, the end tags of some other elements, such as Paragraph (`'), List Item (`'), Definition Term (`'), and Definition Description (`') elements, may be omitted. The content of an element is a sequence of data character strings and nested elements. Some elements, such as anchors, cannot be nested. Anchors and character highlighting may be put inside other constructs. See the HTML DTD, 9.1, "HTML DTD" for full details. NOTE - The SGML declaration for HTML specifies SHORTTAG YES, which means that there are other valid syntaxes for tags, such as NET tags, `'; and empty end-tags, `>'. Until support for these idioms is widely deployed, their use is strongly discouraged. 3.2.3. Names A name consists of a letter followed by letters, digits, periods, or hyphens. The length of a name is limited to 72 characters by the `NAMELEN' parameter in the SGML declaration for HTML, 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". Element and attribute names are not case sensitive, but entity names are. For example, `', `', and `' are equivalent, whereas `&' is different from `&'. In a start-tag, the element name must immediately follow the tag open delimiter `<'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 14] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.2.4. Attributes In a start-tag, white space and attributes are allowed between the element name and the closing delimiter. An attribute specification typically consists of an attribute name, an equal sign, and a value, though some attribute specifications may be just a name token. White space is allowed around the equal sign. The value of the attribute may be either: * A string literal, delimited by single quotes or double quotes and not containing any occurrences of the delimiting character. NOTE - Some historical implementations consider any occurrence of the `>' character to signal the end of a tag. For compatibility with such implementations, when `>' appears in an attribute value, it should be represented with a numeric character reference. For example, `' should be written `' or `'. * A name token (a sequence of letters, digits, periods, or hyphens). Name tokens are not case sensitive. NOTE - Some historical implementations allow any character except space or `>' in a name token. In this example, is the element name, src is the attribute name, and `http://host/dir/file.gif' is the attribute value: A useful technique for computing an attribute value literal for a given string is to replace each quote and white space character by an entity reference or numeric character reference as follows: ENTITY NUMERIC CHARACTER REFERENCE CHAR REF CHARACTER DESCRIPTION --------- ---------- ----------- --------------------- HT Tab LF Line Feed CR Carriage Return SP Space " " " Quotation mark & & & Ampersand Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 15] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 For example: The `NAMELEN' parameter in the SGML declaration (9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML") limits the length of an attribute value to 1024 characters. Attributes such as ISMAP and COMPACT may be written using a minimized syntax (see 7.9.1.2 "Omitted Attribute Name" in [SGML]). The markup: can be written using a minimized syntax: NOTE - Some historical implementations only understand the minimized syntax. 3.2.5. Comments To include comments in an HTML document, use a comment declaration. A comment declaration consists of `'. Each comment starts with `--' and includes all text up to and including the next occurrence of `--'. In a comment declaration, white space is allowed after each comment, but not before the first comment. The entire comment declaration is ignored. NOTE - Some historical HTML implementations incorrectly consider any `>' character to be the termination of a comment. For example: HTML Comment Example Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 16] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.3. HTML Public Text Identifiers To identify information as an HTML document conforming to this specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations. This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD in 9.1, "HTML DTD". NOTE - If the body of a `text/html' message entity does not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user agent should infer the above document type declaration. This document type declaration also refers to the HTML DTD which appears in 9.1, "HTML DTD". This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD in 9.3, "Level 1 HTML DTD". Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents. These two document type declarations refer to the HTML DTD in 9.2, "Strict HTML DTD" and 9.4, "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. HTML user agents may support other document types. In particular, they may support other formal public identifiers, or other document types altogether. They may support an internal declaration subset with supplemental entity, element, and other markup declarations. 3.4. Example HTML Document Structural Example First Header This is a paragraph in the example HTML file. Keep in mind Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 17] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 that the title does not appear in the document text, but that the header (defined by H1) does. First item in an ordered list. Second item in an ordered list. Note that lists can be nested; Whitespace may be used to assist in reading the HTML source. Third item in an ordered list. This is an additional paragraph. Technically, end tags are not required for paragraphs, although they are allowed. You can include character highlighting in a paragraph. This sentence of the paragraph is emphasized. Note that the </P> end tag has been omitted. Be sure to read these bold instructions. 4. HTML as an Internet Media Type An HTML user agent allows users to interact with resources which have HTML representations. At a minimum, it must allow users to examine and navigate the content of HTML level 1 documents. HTML user agents should be able to preserve all formatting distinctions represented in an HTML document, and be able to simultaneously present resources referred to by IMG elements (they may ignore some formatting distinctions or IMG resources at the request of the user). Level 2 HTML user agents should support form entry and submission. 4.1. text/html media type This specification defines the Internet Media Type [IMEDIA] (formerly referred to as the Content Type [MIME]) called `text/html'. The following is to be registered with [IANA]. Media Type name text Media subtype name html Required parameters none Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 18] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Optional parameters level, charset Encoding considerations any encoding is allowed Security considerations see 10, "Security Considerations" The optional parameters are defined as follows: Level The level parameter specifies the feature set used in the document. The level is an integer number, implying that any features of same or lower level may be present in the document. Level 1 is all features defined in this specification except those that require the element. Level 2 includes form processing. Level 2 is the default. Charset The charset parameter (as defined in section 7.1.1 of RFC 1521[MIME]) may be given to specify the character encoding scheme used to represent the HTML document as a sequence of octets. The default value is outside the scope of this specification; but for example, the default is `US-ASCII' in the context of MIME mail, and `ISO-8859-1' in the context of HTTP [HTTP]. 4.2. HTML Document Representation A message entity with a content type of `text/html' represents an HTML document, consisting of a single text entity. The `charset' parameter (whether implicit or explicit) identifies a character encoding scheme. The text entity consists of the characters determined by this character encoding scheme and the octets of the body of the message entity. 4.2.1. Undeclared Markup Error Handling To facilitate experimentation and interoperability between implementations of various versions of HTML, the installed base of HTML user agents supports a superset of the HTML 2.0 language by reducing it to HTML 2.0: markup in the form of a start-tag or end- tag, whose generic identifier is not declared is mapped to nothing during tokenization. Undeclared attributes are treated similarly. The entire attribute specification of an unknown attribute (i.e., the unknown attribute and its value, if any) should be ignored. On the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 19] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 other hand, references to undeclared entities should be treated as data characters. For example: foo... => ,"foo",,,"..." xxx yyy => "xxx ",," yyy Let α & β be finite sets. => "Let α & β be finite sets." Support for notifying the user of such errors is encouraged. Information providers are warned that this convention is not binding: unspecified behavior may result, as such markup does not conform to this specification. 4.2.2. Conventional Representation of Newlines SGML specifies that a text entity is a sequence of records, each beginning with a record start character and ending with a record end character (code positions 10 and 13 respectively) (section 7.6.1, "Record Boundaries" in [SGML]). [MIME] specifies that a body of type `text/*' is a sequence of lines, each terminated by CRLF, that is, octets 13, 10. In practice, HTML documents are frequently represented and transmitted using an end of line convention that depends on the conventions of the source of the document; frequently, that representation consists of CR only, LF only, or a CR LF sequence. Hence the decoding of the octets will often result in a text entity with some missing record start and record end characters. Since there is no ambiguity, HTML user agents are encouraged to infer the missing record start and end characters. An HTML user agent should treat end of line in any of its variations as a word space in all contexts except preformatted text. Within preformatted text, an HTML user agent should treat any of the three common representations of end-of-line as starting a new line. 5. Document Structure An HTML document is a tree of elements, including a head and body, headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. Form elements are discussed in 8, "Forms". Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 20] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.1. Document Element: HTML The HTML document element consists of a head and a body, much like a memo or a mail message. The head contains the title and optional elements. The body is a text flow consisting of paragraphs, lists, and other elements. 5.2. Head: HEAD The head of an HTML document is an unordered collection of information about the document. For example: Introduction to HTML ... 5.2.1. Title: TITLE Every HTML document must contain a element. The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context. A short title, such as "Introduction" may be meaningless out of context. A title such as "Introduction to HTML Elements" is more appropriate. NOTE - The length of a title is not limited; however, long titles may be truncated in some applications. To minimize this possibility, titles should be fewer than 64 characters. A user agent may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document. This differs from headings (5.4, "Headings: H1 ... H6"), which are typically displayed within the body text flow. 5.2.2. Base Address: BASE The optional element provides a base address for interpreting relative URLs when the document is read out of context (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI. 5.2.3. Keyword Index: ISINDEX The element indicates that the user agent should allow the user to search an index by giving keywords. See 7.5, "Queries and Indexes" for details. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 21] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.4. Link: LINK The element represents a hyperlink (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). Any number of LINK elements may occur in the element of an HTML document. It has the same attributes as the element (see 5.7.3, "Anchor: A"). The element is typically used to indicate authorship, related indexes and glossaries, older or more recent versions, document hierarchy, associated resources such as style sheets, etc. 5.2.5. Associated Meta-information: META The element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information. Meta-information has two main functions: * to provide a means to discover that the data set exists and how it might be obtained or accessed; and * to document the content, quality, and features of a data set, indicating its fitness for use. Each element specifies a name/value pair. If multiple META elements are provided with the same name, their combined contents-- concatenated as a comma-separated list--is the value associated with that name. NOTE - The element should not be used where a specific element, such as , would be more appropriate. Rather than a element with a URI as the value of the CONTENT attribute, use a element. HTTP servers may read the content of the document to generate header fields corresponding to any elements defining a value for the attribute HTTP-EQUIV. NOTE - The method by which the server extracts document meta-information is unspecified and not mandatory. The element only provides an extensible mechanism for identifying and embedding document meta-information -- how it may be used is up to the individual server implementation and the HTML user agent. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 22] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Attributes of the META element: HTTP-EQUIV binds the element to an HTTP header field. An HTTP server may use this information to process the document. In particular, it may include a header field in the responses to requests for this document: the header name is taken from the HTTP-EQUIV attribute value, and the header value is taken from the value of the CONTENT attribute. HTTP header names are not case sensitive. NAME specifies the name of the name/value pair. If not present, HTTP-EQUIV gives the name. CONTENT specifies the value of the name/value pair. Examples If the document contains: then the server may include the following header fields: Expires: Tue, 04 Dec 1993 21:29:02 GMT Keywords: Fred, Barney Reply-to: fielding@ics.uci.edu (Roy Fielding) as part of the HTTP response to a `GET' or `HEAD' request for that document. An HTTP server must not use the element to form an HTTP response header unless the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is present. An HTTP server may disregard any elements that specify information controlled by the HTTP server, for example `Server', `Date', and `Last-modified'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 23] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.6. Next Id: NEXTID The element is included for historical reasons only. HTML documents should not contain elements. The element gives a hint for the name to use for a new element when editing an HTML document. It should be distinct from all NAME attribute values on elements. For example: 5.3. Body: BODY The element contains the text flow of the document, including headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. For example: Important Stuff Explanation about important stuff... 5.4. Headings: H1 ... H6 The six heading elements, through , denote section headings. Although the order and occurrence of headings is not constrained by the HTML DTD, documents should not skip levels (for example, from H1 to H3), as converting such documents to other representations is often problematic. Example of use: This is a heading Here is some text Second level heading Here is some more text. Typical renderings are: H1 Bold, very-large font, centered. One or two blank lines above and below. H2 Bold, large font, flush-left. One or two blank lines above and below. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 24] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 H3 Italic, large font, slightly indented from the left margin. One or two blank lines above and below. H4 Bold, normal font, indented more than H3. One blank line above and below. H5 Italic, normal font, indented as H4. One blank line above. H6 Bold, indented same as normal text, more than H5. One blank line above. 5.5. Block Structuring Elements Block structuring elements include paragraphs, lists, and block quotes. They must not contain heading elements, but they may contain phrase markup, and in some cases, they may be nested. 5.5.1. Paragraph: P The element indicates a paragraph. The exact indentation, leading space, etc. of a paragraph is not specified and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc. Typically, paragraphs are surrounded by a vertical space of one line or half a line. The first line in a paragraph is indented in some cases. Example of use: This Heading Precedes the Paragraph This is the text of the first paragraph. This is the text of the second paragraph. Although you do not need to start paragraphs on new lines, maintaining this convention facilitates document maintenance. This is the text of a third paragraph. 5.5.2. Preformatted Text: PRE The element represents a character cell block of text and is suitable for text that has been formatted for a monospaced font. The tag may be used with the optional WIDTH attribute. The WIDTH attribute specifies the maximum number of characters for a line Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 25] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 and allows the HTML user agent to select a suitable font and indentation. Within preformatted text: * Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. NOTE - References to the "beginning of a new line" do not imply that the renderer is forbidden from using a constant left indent for rendering preformatted text. The left indent may be constrained by the width required. * Anchor elements and phrase markup may be used. NOTE - Constraints on the processing of content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
Some text. *wow*
| \-"Some text. " | \-EM | | | \- | | | \-"*wow*" | | | \- | \-
', `', and `' are equivalent, whereas `&' is different from `&'. In a start-tag, the element name must immediately follow the tag open delimiter `<'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 14] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.2.4. Attributes In a start-tag, white space and attributes are allowed between the element name and the closing delimiter. An attribute specification typically consists of an attribute name, an equal sign, and a value, though some attribute specifications may be just a name token. White space is allowed around the equal sign. The value of the attribute may be either: * A string literal, delimited by single quotes or double quotes and not containing any occurrences of the delimiting character. NOTE - Some historical implementations consider any occurrence of the `>' character to signal the end of a tag. For compatibility with such implementations, when `>' appears in an attribute value, it should be represented with a numeric character reference. For example, `' should be written `' or `'. * A name token (a sequence of letters, digits, periods, or hyphens). Name tokens are not case sensitive. NOTE - Some historical implementations allow any character except space or `>' in a name token. In this example, is the element name, src is the attribute name, and `http://host/dir/file.gif' is the attribute value: A useful technique for computing an attribute value literal for a given string is to replace each quote and white space character by an entity reference or numeric character reference as follows: ENTITY NUMERIC CHARACTER REFERENCE CHAR REF CHARACTER DESCRIPTION --------- ---------- ----------- --------------------- HT Tab LF Line Feed CR Carriage Return SP Space " " " Quotation mark & & & Ampersand Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 15] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 For example: The `NAMELEN' parameter in the SGML declaration (9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML") limits the length of an attribute value to 1024 characters. Attributes such as ISMAP and COMPACT may be written using a minimized syntax (see 7.9.1.2 "Omitted Attribute Name" in [SGML]). The markup: can be written using a minimized syntax: NOTE - Some historical implementations only understand the minimized syntax. 3.2.5. Comments To include comments in an HTML document, use a comment declaration. A comment declaration consists of `'. Each comment starts with `--' and includes all text up to and including the next occurrence of `--'. In a comment declaration, white space is allowed after each comment, but not before the first comment. The entire comment declaration is ignored. NOTE - Some historical HTML implementations incorrectly consider any `>' character to be the termination of a comment. For example: HTML Comment Example Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 16] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.3. HTML Public Text Identifiers To identify information as an HTML document conforming to this specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations. This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD in 9.1, "HTML DTD". NOTE - If the body of a `text/html' message entity does not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user agent should infer the above document type declaration. This document type declaration also refers to the HTML DTD which appears in 9.1, "HTML DTD". This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD in 9.3, "Level 1 HTML DTD". Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents. These two document type declarations refer to the HTML DTD in 9.2, "Strict HTML DTD" and 9.4, "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. HTML user agents may support other document types. In particular, they may support other formal public identifiers, or other document types altogether. They may support an internal declaration subset with supplemental entity, element, and other markup declarations. 3.4. Example HTML Document Structural Example First Header This is a paragraph in the example HTML file. Keep in mind Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 17] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 that the title does not appear in the document text, but that the header (defined by H1) does. First item in an ordered list. Second item in an ordered list. Note that lists can be nested; Whitespace may be used to assist in reading the HTML source. Third item in an ordered list. This is an additional paragraph. Technically, end tags are not required for paragraphs, although they are allowed. You can include character highlighting in a paragraph. This sentence of the paragraph is emphasized. Note that the </P> end tag has been omitted. Be sure to read these bold instructions. 4. HTML as an Internet Media Type An HTML user agent allows users to interact with resources which have HTML representations. At a minimum, it must allow users to examine and navigate the content of HTML level 1 documents. HTML user agents should be able to preserve all formatting distinctions represented in an HTML document, and be able to simultaneously present resources referred to by IMG elements (they may ignore some formatting distinctions or IMG resources at the request of the user). Level 2 HTML user agents should support form entry and submission. 4.1. text/html media type This specification defines the Internet Media Type [IMEDIA] (formerly referred to as the Content Type [MIME]) called `text/html'. The following is to be registered with [IANA]. Media Type name text Media subtype name html Required parameters none Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 18] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Optional parameters level, charset Encoding considerations any encoding is allowed Security considerations see 10, "Security Considerations" The optional parameters are defined as follows: Level The level parameter specifies the feature set used in the document. The level is an integer number, implying that any features of same or lower level may be present in the document. Level 1 is all features defined in this specification except those that require the element. Level 2 includes form processing. Level 2 is the default. Charset The charset parameter (as defined in section 7.1.1 of RFC 1521[MIME]) may be given to specify the character encoding scheme used to represent the HTML document as a sequence of octets. The default value is outside the scope of this specification; but for example, the default is `US-ASCII' in the context of MIME mail, and `ISO-8859-1' in the context of HTTP [HTTP]. 4.2. HTML Document Representation A message entity with a content type of `text/html' represents an HTML document, consisting of a single text entity. The `charset' parameter (whether implicit or explicit) identifies a character encoding scheme. The text entity consists of the characters determined by this character encoding scheme and the octets of the body of the message entity. 4.2.1. Undeclared Markup Error Handling To facilitate experimentation and interoperability between implementations of various versions of HTML, the installed base of HTML user agents supports a superset of the HTML 2.0 language by reducing it to HTML 2.0: markup in the form of a start-tag or end- tag, whose generic identifier is not declared is mapped to nothing during tokenization. Undeclared attributes are treated similarly. The entire attribute specification of an unknown attribute (i.e., the unknown attribute and its value, if any) should be ignored. On the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 19] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 other hand, references to undeclared entities should be treated as data characters. For example: foo... => ,"foo",,,"..." xxx yyy => "xxx ",," yyy Let α & β be finite sets. => "Let α & β be finite sets." Support for notifying the user of such errors is encouraged. Information providers are warned that this convention is not binding: unspecified behavior may result, as such markup does not conform to this specification. 4.2.2. Conventional Representation of Newlines SGML specifies that a text entity is a sequence of records, each beginning with a record start character and ending with a record end character (code positions 10 and 13 respectively) (section 7.6.1, "Record Boundaries" in [SGML]). [MIME] specifies that a body of type `text/*' is a sequence of lines, each terminated by CRLF, that is, octets 13, 10. In practice, HTML documents are frequently represented and transmitted using an end of line convention that depends on the conventions of the source of the document; frequently, that representation consists of CR only, LF only, or a CR LF sequence. Hence the decoding of the octets will often result in a text entity with some missing record start and record end characters. Since there is no ambiguity, HTML user agents are encouraged to infer the missing record start and end characters. An HTML user agent should treat end of line in any of its variations as a word space in all contexts except preformatted text. Within preformatted text, an HTML user agent should treat any of the three common representations of end-of-line as starting a new line. 5. Document Structure An HTML document is a tree of elements, including a head and body, headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. Form elements are discussed in 8, "Forms". Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 20] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.1. Document Element: HTML The HTML document element consists of a head and a body, much like a memo or a mail message. The head contains the title and optional elements. The body is a text flow consisting of paragraphs, lists, and other elements. 5.2. Head: HEAD The head of an HTML document is an unordered collection of information about the document. For example: Introduction to HTML ... 5.2.1. Title: TITLE Every HTML document must contain a element. The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context. A short title, such as "Introduction" may be meaningless out of context. A title such as "Introduction to HTML Elements" is more appropriate. NOTE - The length of a title is not limited; however, long titles may be truncated in some applications. To minimize this possibility, titles should be fewer than 64 characters. A user agent may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document. This differs from headings (5.4, "Headings: H1 ... H6"), which are typically displayed within the body text flow. 5.2.2. Base Address: BASE The optional element provides a base address for interpreting relative URLs when the document is read out of context (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI. 5.2.3. Keyword Index: ISINDEX The element indicates that the user agent should allow the user to search an index by giving keywords. See 7.5, "Queries and Indexes" for details. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 21] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.4. Link: LINK The element represents a hyperlink (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). Any number of LINK elements may occur in the element of an HTML document. It has the same attributes as the element (see 5.7.3, "Anchor: A"). The element is typically used to indicate authorship, related indexes and glossaries, older or more recent versions, document hierarchy, associated resources such as style sheets, etc. 5.2.5. Associated Meta-information: META The element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information. Meta-information has two main functions: * to provide a means to discover that the data set exists and how it might be obtained or accessed; and * to document the content, quality, and features of a data set, indicating its fitness for use. Each element specifies a name/value pair. If multiple META elements are provided with the same name, their combined contents-- concatenated as a comma-separated list--is the value associated with that name. NOTE - The element should not be used where a specific element, such as , would be more appropriate. Rather than a element with a URI as the value of the CONTENT attribute, use a element. HTTP servers may read the content of the document to generate header fields corresponding to any elements defining a value for the attribute HTTP-EQUIV. NOTE - The method by which the server extracts document meta-information is unspecified and not mandatory. The element only provides an extensible mechanism for identifying and embedding document meta-information -- how it may be used is up to the individual server implementation and the HTML user agent. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 22] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Attributes of the META element: HTTP-EQUIV binds the element to an HTTP header field. An HTTP server may use this information to process the document. In particular, it may include a header field in the responses to requests for this document: the header name is taken from the HTTP-EQUIV attribute value, and the header value is taken from the value of the CONTENT attribute. HTTP header names are not case sensitive. NAME specifies the name of the name/value pair. If not present, HTTP-EQUIV gives the name. CONTENT specifies the value of the name/value pair. Examples If the document contains: then the server may include the following header fields: Expires: Tue, 04 Dec 1993 21:29:02 GMT Keywords: Fred, Barney Reply-to: fielding@ics.uci.edu (Roy Fielding) as part of the HTTP response to a `GET' or `HEAD' request for that document. An HTTP server must not use the element to form an HTTP response header unless the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is present. An HTTP server may disregard any elements that specify information controlled by the HTTP server, for example `Server', `Date', and `Last-modified'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 23] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.6. Next Id: NEXTID The element is included for historical reasons only. HTML documents should not contain elements. The element gives a hint for the name to use for a new element when editing an HTML document. It should be distinct from all NAME attribute values on elements. For example: 5.3. Body: BODY The element contains the text flow of the document, including headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. For example: Important Stuff Explanation about important stuff... 5.4. Headings: H1 ... H6 The six heading elements, through , denote section headings. Although the order and occurrence of headings is not constrained by the HTML DTD, documents should not skip levels (for example, from H1 to H3), as converting such documents to other representations is often problematic. Example of use: This is a heading Here is some text Second level heading Here is some more text. Typical renderings are: H1 Bold, very-large font, centered. One or two blank lines above and below. H2 Bold, large font, flush-left. One or two blank lines above and below. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 24] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 H3 Italic, large font, slightly indented from the left margin. One or two blank lines above and below. H4 Bold, normal font, indented more than H3. One blank line above and below. H5 Italic, normal font, indented as H4. One blank line above. H6 Bold, indented same as normal text, more than H5. One blank line above. 5.5. Block Structuring Elements Block structuring elements include paragraphs, lists, and block quotes. They must not contain heading elements, but they may contain phrase markup, and in some cases, they may be nested. 5.5.1. Paragraph: P The element indicates a paragraph. The exact indentation, leading space, etc. of a paragraph is not specified and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc. Typically, paragraphs are surrounded by a vertical space of one line or half a line. The first line in a paragraph is indented in some cases. Example of use: This Heading Precedes the Paragraph This is the text of the first paragraph. This is the text of the second paragraph. Although you do not need to start paragraphs on new lines, maintaining this convention facilitates document maintenance. This is the text of a third paragraph. 5.5.2. Preformatted Text: PRE The element represents a character cell block of text and is suitable for text that has been formatted for a monospaced font. The tag may be used with the optional WIDTH attribute. The WIDTH attribute specifies the maximum number of characters for a line Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 25] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 and allows the HTML user agent to select a suitable font and indentation. Within preformatted text: * Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. NOTE - References to the "beginning of a new line" do not imply that the renderer is forbidden from using a constant left indent for rendering preformatted text. The left indent may be constrained by the width required. * Anchor elements and phrase markup may be used. NOTE - Constraints on the processing of content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
', and `' are equivalent, whereas `&' is different from `&'. In a start-tag, the element name must immediately follow the tag open delimiter `<'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 14] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.2.4. Attributes In a start-tag, white space and attributes are allowed between the element name and the closing delimiter. An attribute specification typically consists of an attribute name, an equal sign, and a value, though some attribute specifications may be just a name token. White space is allowed around the equal sign. The value of the attribute may be either: * A string literal, delimited by single quotes or double quotes and not containing any occurrences of the delimiting character. NOTE - Some historical implementations consider any occurrence of the `>' character to signal the end of a tag. For compatibility with such implementations, when `>' appears in an attribute value, it should be represented with a numeric character reference. For example, `' should be written `' or `'. * A name token (a sequence of letters, digits, periods, or hyphens). Name tokens are not case sensitive. NOTE - Some historical implementations allow any character except space or `>' in a name token. In this example, is the element name, src is the attribute name, and `http://host/dir/file.gif' is the attribute value: A useful technique for computing an attribute value literal for a given string is to replace each quote and white space character by an entity reference or numeric character reference as follows: ENTITY NUMERIC CHARACTER REFERENCE CHAR REF CHARACTER DESCRIPTION --------- ---------- ----------- --------------------- HT Tab LF Line Feed CR Carriage Return SP Space " " " Quotation mark & & & Ampersand Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 15] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 For example: The `NAMELEN' parameter in the SGML declaration (9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML") limits the length of an attribute value to 1024 characters. Attributes such as ISMAP and COMPACT may be written using a minimized syntax (see 7.9.1.2 "Omitted Attribute Name" in [SGML]). The markup: can be written using a minimized syntax: NOTE - Some historical implementations only understand the minimized syntax. 3.2.5. Comments To include comments in an HTML document, use a comment declaration. A comment declaration consists of `'. Each comment starts with `--' and includes all text up to and including the next occurrence of `--'. In a comment declaration, white space is allowed after each comment, but not before the first comment. The entire comment declaration is ignored. NOTE - Some historical HTML implementations incorrectly consider any `>' character to be the termination of a comment. For example: HTML Comment Example Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 16] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.3. HTML Public Text Identifiers To identify information as an HTML document conforming to this specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations. This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD in 9.1, "HTML DTD". NOTE - If the body of a `text/html' message entity does not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user agent should infer the above document type declaration. This document type declaration also refers to the HTML DTD which appears in 9.1, "HTML DTD". This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD in 9.3, "Level 1 HTML DTD". Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents. These two document type declarations refer to the HTML DTD in 9.2, "Strict HTML DTD" and 9.4, "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. HTML user agents may support other document types. In particular, they may support other formal public identifiers, or other document types altogether. They may support an internal declaration subset with supplemental entity, element, and other markup declarations. 3.4. Example HTML Document Structural Example First Header This is a paragraph in the example HTML file. Keep in mind Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 17] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 that the title does not appear in the document text, but that the header (defined by H1) does. First item in an ordered list. Second item in an ordered list. Note that lists can be nested; Whitespace may be used to assist in reading the HTML source. Third item in an ordered list. This is an additional paragraph. Technically, end tags are not required for paragraphs, although they are allowed. You can include character highlighting in a paragraph. This sentence of the paragraph is emphasized. Note that the </P> end tag has been omitted. Be sure to read these bold instructions. 4. HTML as an Internet Media Type An HTML user agent allows users to interact with resources which have HTML representations. At a minimum, it must allow users to examine and navigate the content of HTML level 1 documents. HTML user agents should be able to preserve all formatting distinctions represented in an HTML document, and be able to simultaneously present resources referred to by IMG elements (they may ignore some formatting distinctions or IMG resources at the request of the user). Level 2 HTML user agents should support form entry and submission. 4.1. text/html media type This specification defines the Internet Media Type [IMEDIA] (formerly referred to as the Content Type [MIME]) called `text/html'. The following is to be registered with [IANA]. Media Type name text Media subtype name html Required parameters none Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 18] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Optional parameters level, charset Encoding considerations any encoding is allowed Security considerations see 10, "Security Considerations" The optional parameters are defined as follows: Level The level parameter specifies the feature set used in the document. The level is an integer number, implying that any features of same or lower level may be present in the document. Level 1 is all features defined in this specification except those that require the element. Level 2 includes form processing. Level 2 is the default. Charset The charset parameter (as defined in section 7.1.1 of RFC 1521[MIME]) may be given to specify the character encoding scheme used to represent the HTML document as a sequence of octets. The default value is outside the scope of this specification; but for example, the default is `US-ASCII' in the context of MIME mail, and `ISO-8859-1' in the context of HTTP [HTTP]. 4.2. HTML Document Representation A message entity with a content type of `text/html' represents an HTML document, consisting of a single text entity. The `charset' parameter (whether implicit or explicit) identifies a character encoding scheme. The text entity consists of the characters determined by this character encoding scheme and the octets of the body of the message entity. 4.2.1. Undeclared Markup Error Handling To facilitate experimentation and interoperability between implementations of various versions of HTML, the installed base of HTML user agents supports a superset of the HTML 2.0 language by reducing it to HTML 2.0: markup in the form of a start-tag or end- tag, whose generic identifier is not declared is mapped to nothing during tokenization. Undeclared attributes are treated similarly. The entire attribute specification of an unknown attribute (i.e., the unknown attribute and its value, if any) should be ignored. On the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 19] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 other hand, references to undeclared entities should be treated as data characters. For example: foo... => ,"foo",,,"..." xxx yyy => "xxx ",," yyy Let α & β be finite sets. => "Let α & β be finite sets." Support for notifying the user of such errors is encouraged. Information providers are warned that this convention is not binding: unspecified behavior may result, as such markup does not conform to this specification. 4.2.2. Conventional Representation of Newlines SGML specifies that a text entity is a sequence of records, each beginning with a record start character and ending with a record end character (code positions 10 and 13 respectively) (section 7.6.1, "Record Boundaries" in [SGML]). [MIME] specifies that a body of type `text/*' is a sequence of lines, each terminated by CRLF, that is, octets 13, 10. In practice, HTML documents are frequently represented and transmitted using an end of line convention that depends on the conventions of the source of the document; frequently, that representation consists of CR only, LF only, or a CR LF sequence. Hence the decoding of the octets will often result in a text entity with some missing record start and record end characters. Since there is no ambiguity, HTML user agents are encouraged to infer the missing record start and end characters. An HTML user agent should treat end of line in any of its variations as a word space in all contexts except preformatted text. Within preformatted text, an HTML user agent should treat any of the three common representations of end-of-line as starting a new line. 5. Document Structure An HTML document is a tree of elements, including a head and body, headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. Form elements are discussed in 8, "Forms". Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 20] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.1. Document Element: HTML The HTML document element consists of a head and a body, much like a memo or a mail message. The head contains the title and optional elements. The body is a text flow consisting of paragraphs, lists, and other elements. 5.2. Head: HEAD The head of an HTML document is an unordered collection of information about the document. For example: Introduction to HTML ... 5.2.1. Title: TITLE Every HTML document must contain a element. The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context. A short title, such as "Introduction" may be meaningless out of context. A title such as "Introduction to HTML Elements" is more appropriate. NOTE - The length of a title is not limited; however, long titles may be truncated in some applications. To minimize this possibility, titles should be fewer than 64 characters. A user agent may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document. This differs from headings (5.4, "Headings: H1 ... H6"), which are typically displayed within the body text flow. 5.2.2. Base Address: BASE The optional element provides a base address for interpreting relative URLs when the document is read out of context (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI. 5.2.3. Keyword Index: ISINDEX The element indicates that the user agent should allow the user to search an index by giving keywords. See 7.5, "Queries and Indexes" for details. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 21] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.4. Link: LINK The element represents a hyperlink (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). Any number of LINK elements may occur in the element of an HTML document. It has the same attributes as the element (see 5.7.3, "Anchor: A"). The element is typically used to indicate authorship, related indexes and glossaries, older or more recent versions, document hierarchy, associated resources such as style sheets, etc. 5.2.5. Associated Meta-information: META The element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information. Meta-information has two main functions: * to provide a means to discover that the data set exists and how it might be obtained or accessed; and * to document the content, quality, and features of a data set, indicating its fitness for use. Each element specifies a name/value pair. If multiple META elements are provided with the same name, their combined contents-- concatenated as a comma-separated list--is the value associated with that name. NOTE - The element should not be used where a specific element, such as , would be more appropriate. Rather than a element with a URI as the value of the CONTENT attribute, use a element. HTTP servers may read the content of the document to generate header fields corresponding to any elements defining a value for the attribute HTTP-EQUIV. NOTE - The method by which the server extracts document meta-information is unspecified and not mandatory. The element only provides an extensible mechanism for identifying and embedding document meta-information -- how it may be used is up to the individual server implementation and the HTML user agent. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 22] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Attributes of the META element: HTTP-EQUIV binds the element to an HTTP header field. An HTTP server may use this information to process the document. In particular, it may include a header field in the responses to requests for this document: the header name is taken from the HTTP-EQUIV attribute value, and the header value is taken from the value of the CONTENT attribute. HTTP header names are not case sensitive. NAME specifies the name of the name/value pair. If not present, HTTP-EQUIV gives the name. CONTENT specifies the value of the name/value pair. Examples If the document contains: then the server may include the following header fields: Expires: Tue, 04 Dec 1993 21:29:02 GMT Keywords: Fred, Barney Reply-to: fielding@ics.uci.edu (Roy Fielding) as part of the HTTP response to a `GET' or `HEAD' request for that document. An HTTP server must not use the element to form an HTTP response header unless the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is present. An HTTP server may disregard any elements that specify information controlled by the HTTP server, for example `Server', `Date', and `Last-modified'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 23] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.6. Next Id: NEXTID The element is included for historical reasons only. HTML documents should not contain elements. The element gives a hint for the name to use for a new element when editing an HTML document. It should be distinct from all NAME attribute values on elements. For example: 5.3. Body: BODY The element contains the text flow of the document, including headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. For example: Important Stuff Explanation about important stuff... 5.4. Headings: H1 ... H6 The six heading elements, through , denote section headings. Although the order and occurrence of headings is not constrained by the HTML DTD, documents should not skip levels (for example, from H1 to H3), as converting such documents to other representations is often problematic. Example of use: This is a heading Here is some text Second level heading Here is some more text. Typical renderings are: H1 Bold, very-large font, centered. One or two blank lines above and below. H2 Bold, large font, flush-left. One or two blank lines above and below. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 24] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 H3 Italic, large font, slightly indented from the left margin. One or two blank lines above and below. H4 Bold, normal font, indented more than H3. One blank line above and below. H5 Italic, normal font, indented as H4. One blank line above. H6 Bold, indented same as normal text, more than H5. One blank line above. 5.5. Block Structuring Elements Block structuring elements include paragraphs, lists, and block quotes. They must not contain heading elements, but they may contain phrase markup, and in some cases, they may be nested. 5.5.1. Paragraph: P The element indicates a paragraph. The exact indentation, leading space, etc. of a paragraph is not specified and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc. Typically, paragraphs are surrounded by a vertical space of one line or half a line. The first line in a paragraph is indented in some cases. Example of use: This Heading Precedes the Paragraph This is the text of the first paragraph. This is the text of the second paragraph. Although you do not need to start paragraphs on new lines, maintaining this convention facilitates document maintenance. This is the text of a third paragraph. 5.5.2. Preformatted Text: PRE The element represents a character cell block of text and is suitable for text that has been formatted for a monospaced font. The tag may be used with the optional WIDTH attribute. The WIDTH attribute specifies the maximum number of characters for a line Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 25] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 and allows the HTML user agent to select a suitable font and indentation. Within preformatted text: * Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. NOTE - References to the "beginning of a new line" do not imply that the renderer is forbidden from using a constant left indent for rendering preformatted text. The left indent may be constrained by the width required. * Anchor elements and phrase markup may be used. NOTE - Constraints on the processing of content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
' are equivalent, whereas `&' is different from `&'. In a start-tag, the element name must immediately follow the tag open delimiter `<'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 14] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.2.4. Attributes In a start-tag, white space and attributes are allowed between the element name and the closing delimiter. An attribute specification typically consists of an attribute name, an equal sign, and a value, though some attribute specifications may be just a name token. White space is allowed around the equal sign. The value of the attribute may be either: * A string literal, delimited by single quotes or double quotes and not containing any occurrences of the delimiting character. NOTE - Some historical implementations consider any occurrence of the `>' character to signal the end of a tag. For compatibility with such implementations, when `>' appears in an attribute value, it should be represented with a numeric character reference. For example, `' should be written `' or `'. * A name token (a sequence of letters, digits, periods, or hyphens). Name tokens are not case sensitive. NOTE - Some historical implementations allow any character except space or `>' in a name token. In this example, is the element name, src is the attribute name, and `http://host/dir/file.gif' is the attribute value: A useful technique for computing an attribute value literal for a given string is to replace each quote and white space character by an entity reference or numeric character reference as follows: ENTITY NUMERIC CHARACTER REFERENCE CHAR REF CHARACTER DESCRIPTION --------- ---------- ----------- --------------------- HT Tab LF Line Feed CR Carriage Return SP Space " " " Quotation mark & & & Ampersand Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 15] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 For example: The `NAMELEN' parameter in the SGML declaration (9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML") limits the length of an attribute value to 1024 characters. Attributes such as ISMAP and COMPACT may be written using a minimized syntax (see 7.9.1.2 "Omitted Attribute Name" in [SGML]). The markup: can be written using a minimized syntax: NOTE - Some historical implementations only understand the minimized syntax. 3.2.5. Comments To include comments in an HTML document, use a comment declaration. A comment declaration consists of `'. Each comment starts with `--' and includes all text up to and including the next occurrence of `--'. In a comment declaration, white space is allowed after each comment, but not before the first comment. The entire comment declaration is ignored. NOTE - Some historical HTML implementations incorrectly consider any `>' character to be the termination of a comment. For example: HTML Comment Example Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 16] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.3. HTML Public Text Identifiers To identify information as an HTML document conforming to this specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations. This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD in 9.1, "HTML DTD". NOTE - If the body of a `text/html' message entity does not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user agent should infer the above document type declaration. This document type declaration also refers to the HTML DTD which appears in 9.1, "HTML DTD". This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD in 9.3, "Level 1 HTML DTD". Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents. These two document type declarations refer to the HTML DTD in 9.2, "Strict HTML DTD" and 9.4, "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. HTML user agents may support other document types. In particular, they may support other formal public identifiers, or other document types altogether. They may support an internal declaration subset with supplemental entity, element, and other markup declarations. 3.4. Example HTML Document Structural Example First Header This is a paragraph in the example HTML file. Keep in mind Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 17] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 that the title does not appear in the document text, but that the header (defined by H1) does. First item in an ordered list. Second item in an ordered list. Note that lists can be nested; Whitespace may be used to assist in reading the HTML source. Third item in an ordered list. This is an additional paragraph. Technically, end tags are not required for paragraphs, although they are allowed. You can include character highlighting in a paragraph. This sentence of the paragraph is emphasized. Note that the </P> end tag has been omitted. Be sure to read these bold instructions. 4. HTML as an Internet Media Type An HTML user agent allows users to interact with resources which have HTML representations. At a minimum, it must allow users to examine and navigate the content of HTML level 1 documents. HTML user agents should be able to preserve all formatting distinctions represented in an HTML document, and be able to simultaneously present resources referred to by IMG elements (they may ignore some formatting distinctions or IMG resources at the request of the user). Level 2 HTML user agents should support form entry and submission. 4.1. text/html media type This specification defines the Internet Media Type [IMEDIA] (formerly referred to as the Content Type [MIME]) called `text/html'. The following is to be registered with [IANA]. Media Type name text Media subtype name html Required parameters none Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 18] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Optional parameters level, charset Encoding considerations any encoding is allowed Security considerations see 10, "Security Considerations" The optional parameters are defined as follows: Level The level parameter specifies the feature set used in the document. The level is an integer number, implying that any features of same or lower level may be present in the document. Level 1 is all features defined in this specification except those that require the element. Level 2 includes form processing. Level 2 is the default. Charset The charset parameter (as defined in section 7.1.1 of RFC 1521[MIME]) may be given to specify the character encoding scheme used to represent the HTML document as a sequence of octets. The default value is outside the scope of this specification; but for example, the default is `US-ASCII' in the context of MIME mail, and `ISO-8859-1' in the context of HTTP [HTTP]. 4.2. HTML Document Representation A message entity with a content type of `text/html' represents an HTML document, consisting of a single text entity. The `charset' parameter (whether implicit or explicit) identifies a character encoding scheme. The text entity consists of the characters determined by this character encoding scheme and the octets of the body of the message entity. 4.2.1. Undeclared Markup Error Handling To facilitate experimentation and interoperability between implementations of various versions of HTML, the installed base of HTML user agents supports a superset of the HTML 2.0 language by reducing it to HTML 2.0: markup in the form of a start-tag or end- tag, whose generic identifier is not declared is mapped to nothing during tokenization. Undeclared attributes are treated similarly. The entire attribute specification of an unknown attribute (i.e., the unknown attribute and its value, if any) should be ignored. On the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 19] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 other hand, references to undeclared entities should be treated as data characters. For example: foo... => ,"foo",,,"..." xxx yyy => "xxx ",," yyy Let α & β be finite sets. => "Let α & β be finite sets." Support for notifying the user of such errors is encouraged. Information providers are warned that this convention is not binding: unspecified behavior may result, as such markup does not conform to this specification. 4.2.2. Conventional Representation of Newlines SGML specifies that a text entity is a sequence of records, each beginning with a record start character and ending with a record end character (code positions 10 and 13 respectively) (section 7.6.1, "Record Boundaries" in [SGML]). [MIME] specifies that a body of type `text/*' is a sequence of lines, each terminated by CRLF, that is, octets 13, 10. In practice, HTML documents are frequently represented and transmitted using an end of line convention that depends on the conventions of the source of the document; frequently, that representation consists of CR only, LF only, or a CR LF sequence. Hence the decoding of the octets will often result in a text entity with some missing record start and record end characters. Since there is no ambiguity, HTML user agents are encouraged to infer the missing record start and end characters. An HTML user agent should treat end of line in any of its variations as a word space in all contexts except preformatted text. Within preformatted text, an HTML user agent should treat any of the three common representations of end-of-line as starting a new line. 5. Document Structure An HTML document is a tree of elements, including a head and body, headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. Form elements are discussed in 8, "Forms". Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 20] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.1. Document Element: HTML The HTML document element consists of a head and a body, much like a memo or a mail message. The head contains the title and optional elements. The body is a text flow consisting of paragraphs, lists, and other elements. 5.2. Head: HEAD The head of an HTML document is an unordered collection of information about the document. For example: Introduction to HTML ... 5.2.1. Title: TITLE Every HTML document must contain a element. The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context. A short title, such as "Introduction" may be meaningless out of context. A title such as "Introduction to HTML Elements" is more appropriate. NOTE - The length of a title is not limited; however, long titles may be truncated in some applications. To minimize this possibility, titles should be fewer than 64 characters. A user agent may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document. This differs from headings (5.4, "Headings: H1 ... H6"), which are typically displayed within the body text flow. 5.2.2. Base Address: BASE The optional element provides a base address for interpreting relative URLs when the document is read out of context (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI. 5.2.3. Keyword Index: ISINDEX The element indicates that the user agent should allow the user to search an index by giving keywords. See 7.5, "Queries and Indexes" for details. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 21] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.4. Link: LINK The element represents a hyperlink (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). Any number of LINK elements may occur in the element of an HTML document. It has the same attributes as the element (see 5.7.3, "Anchor: A"). The element is typically used to indicate authorship, related indexes and glossaries, older or more recent versions, document hierarchy, associated resources such as style sheets, etc. 5.2.5. Associated Meta-information: META The element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information. Meta-information has two main functions: * to provide a means to discover that the data set exists and how it might be obtained or accessed; and * to document the content, quality, and features of a data set, indicating its fitness for use. Each element specifies a name/value pair. If multiple META elements are provided with the same name, their combined contents-- concatenated as a comma-separated list--is the value associated with that name. NOTE - The element should not be used where a specific element, such as , would be more appropriate. Rather than a element with a URI as the value of the CONTENT attribute, use a element. HTTP servers may read the content of the document to generate header fields corresponding to any elements defining a value for the attribute HTTP-EQUIV. NOTE - The method by which the server extracts document meta-information is unspecified and not mandatory. The element only provides an extensible mechanism for identifying and embedding document meta-information -- how it may be used is up to the individual server implementation and the HTML user agent. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 22] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Attributes of the META element: HTTP-EQUIV binds the element to an HTTP header field. An HTTP server may use this information to process the document. In particular, it may include a header field in the responses to requests for this document: the header name is taken from the HTTP-EQUIV attribute value, and the header value is taken from the value of the CONTENT attribute. HTTP header names are not case sensitive. NAME specifies the name of the name/value pair. If not present, HTTP-EQUIV gives the name. CONTENT specifies the value of the name/value pair. Examples If the document contains: then the server may include the following header fields: Expires: Tue, 04 Dec 1993 21:29:02 GMT Keywords: Fred, Barney Reply-to: fielding@ics.uci.edu (Roy Fielding) as part of the HTTP response to a `GET' or `HEAD' request for that document. An HTTP server must not use the element to form an HTTP response header unless the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is present. An HTTP server may disregard any elements that specify information controlled by the HTTP server, for example `Server', `Date', and `Last-modified'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 23] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.2.6. Next Id: NEXTID The element is included for historical reasons only. HTML documents should not contain elements. The element gives a hint for the name to use for a new element when editing an HTML document. It should be distinct from all NAME attribute values on elements. For example: 5.3. Body: BODY The element contains the text flow of the document, including headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. For example: Important Stuff Explanation about important stuff... 5.4. Headings: H1 ... H6 The six heading elements, through , denote section headings. Although the order and occurrence of headings is not constrained by the HTML DTD, documents should not skip levels (for example, from H1 to H3), as converting such documents to other representations is often problematic. Example of use: This is a heading Here is some text Second level heading Here is some more text. Typical renderings are: H1 Bold, very-large font, centered. One or two blank lines above and below. H2 Bold, large font, flush-left. One or two blank lines above and below. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 24] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 H3 Italic, large font, slightly indented from the left margin. One or two blank lines above and below. H4 Bold, normal font, indented more than H3. One blank line above and below. H5 Italic, normal font, indented as H4. One blank line above. H6 Bold, indented same as normal text, more than H5. One blank line above. 5.5. Block Structuring Elements Block structuring elements include paragraphs, lists, and block quotes. They must not contain heading elements, but they may contain phrase markup, and in some cases, they may be nested. 5.5.1. Paragraph: P The element indicates a paragraph. The exact indentation, leading space, etc. of a paragraph is not specified and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc. Typically, paragraphs are surrounded by a vertical space of one line or half a line. The first line in a paragraph is indented in some cases. Example of use: This Heading Precedes the Paragraph This is the text of the first paragraph. This is the text of the second paragraph. Although you do not need to start paragraphs on new lines, maintaining this convention facilitates document maintenance. This is the text of a third paragraph. 5.5.2. Preformatted Text: PRE The element represents a character cell block of text and is suitable for text that has been formatted for a monospaced font. The tag may be used with the optional WIDTH attribute. The WIDTH attribute specifies the maximum number of characters for a line Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 25] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 and allows the HTML user agent to select a suitable font and indentation. Within preformatted text: * Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. NOTE - References to the "beginning of a new line" do not imply that the renderer is forbidden from using a constant left indent for rendering preformatted text. The left indent may be constrained by the width required. * Anchor elements and phrase markup may be used. NOTE - Constraints on the processing of content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 16] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 3.3. HTML Public Text Identifiers To identify information as an HTML document conforming to this specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations. This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD in 9.1, "HTML DTD". NOTE - If the body of a `text/html' message entity does not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user agent should infer the above document type declaration. This document type declaration also refers to the HTML DTD which appears in 9.1, "HTML DTD". This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD in 9.3, "Level 1 HTML DTD". Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents. These two document type declarations refer to the HTML DTD in 9.2, "Strict HTML DTD" and 9.4, "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. HTML user agents may support other document types. In particular, they may support other formal public identifiers, or other document types altogether. They may support an internal declaration subset with supplemental entity, element, and other markup declarations. 3.4. Example HTML Document
This is a paragraph in the example HTML file. Keep in mind Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 17] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 that the title does not appear in the document text, but that the header (defined by H1) does.
This is an additional paragraph. Technically, end tags are not required for paragraphs, although they are allowed. You can include character highlighting in a paragraph. This sentence of the paragraph is emphasized. Note that the </P> end tag has been omitted.
Be sure to read these bold instructions. 4. HTML as an Internet Media Type An HTML user agent allows users to interact with resources which have HTML representations. At a minimum, it must allow users to examine and navigate the content of HTML level 1 documents. HTML user agents should be able to preserve all formatting distinctions represented in an HTML document, and be able to simultaneously present resources referred to by IMG elements (they may ignore some formatting distinctions or IMG resources at the request of the user). Level 2 HTML user agents should support form entry and submission. 4.1. text/html media type This specification defines the Internet Media Type [IMEDIA] (formerly referred to as the Content Type [MIME]) called `text/html'. The following is to be registered with [IANA]. Media Type name text Media subtype name html Required parameters none Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 18] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Optional parameters level, charset Encoding considerations any encoding is allowed Security considerations see 10, "Security Considerations" The optional parameters are defined as follows: Level The level parameter specifies the feature set used in the document. The level is an integer number, implying that any features of same or lower level may be present in the document. Level 1 is all features defined in this specification except those that require the
...
,"..." xxx
yyy => "xxx ",
," yyy Let α & β be finite sets. => "Let α & β be finite sets." Support for notifying the user of such errors is encouraged. Information providers are warned that this convention is not binding: unspecified behavior may result, as such markup does not conform to this specification. 4.2.2. Conventional Representation of Newlines SGML specifies that a text entity is a sequence of records, each beginning with a record start character and ending with a record end character (code positions 10 and 13 respectively) (section 7.6.1, "Record Boundaries" in [SGML]). [MIME] specifies that a body of type `text/*' is a sequence of lines, each terminated by CRLF, that is, octets 13, 10. In practice, HTML documents are frequently represented and transmitted using an end of line convention that depends on the conventions of the source of the document; frequently, that representation consists of CR only, LF only, or a CR LF sequence. Hence the decoding of the octets will often result in a text entity with some missing record start and record end characters. Since there is no ambiguity, HTML user agents are encouraged to infer the missing record start and end characters. An HTML user agent should treat end of line in any of its variations as a word space in all contexts except preformatted text. Within preformatted text, an HTML user agent should treat any of the three common representations of end-of-line as starting a new line. 5. Document Structure An HTML document is a tree of elements, including a head and body, headings, paragraphs, lists, etc. Form elements are discussed in 8, "Forms". Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 20] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.1. Document Element: HTML The HTML document element consists of a head and a body, much like a memo or a mail message. The head contains the title and optional elements. The body is a text flow consisting of paragraphs, lists, and other elements. 5.2. Head: HEAD The head of an HTML document is an unordered collection of information about the document. For example:
Explanation about important stuff... 5.4. Headings: H1 ... H6 The six heading elements,
element indicates a paragraph. The exact indentation, leading space, etc. of a paragraph is not specified and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc. Typically, paragraphs are surrounded by a vertical space of one line or half a line. The first line in a paragraph is indented in some cases. Example of use:
This is the text of the first paragraph.
This is the text of the second paragraph. Although you do not need to start paragraphs on new lines, maintaining this convention facilitates document maintenance.
This is the text of a third paragraph.
element represents a character cell block of text and is suitable for text that has been formatted for a monospaced font. The tag may be used with the optional WIDTH attribute. The WIDTH attribute specifies the maximum number of characters for a line Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 25] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 and allows the HTML user agent to select a suitable font and indentation. Within preformatted text: * Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. NOTE - References to the "beginning of a new line" do not imply that the renderer is forbidden from using a constant left indent for rendering preformatted text. The left indent may be constrained by the width required. * Anchor elements and phrase markup may be used. NOTE - Constraints on the processing of content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
tag may be used with the optional WIDTH attribute. The WIDTH attribute specifies the maximum number of characters for a line Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 25] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 and allows the HTML user agent to select a suitable font and indentation. Within preformatted text: * Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. NOTE - References to the "beginning of a new line" do not imply that the renderer is forbidden from using a constant left indent for rendering preformatted text. The left indent may be constrained by the width required. * Anchor elements and phrase markup may be used. NOTE - Constraints on the processing of content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
content may limit or prevent the ability of the HTML user agent to faithfully render phrase markup. * Elements that define paragraph formatting (headings, address, etc.) must not be used. NOTE - Some historical documents contain tags in elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
tags in
elements. User agents are encouraged to treat this as a line break. A tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use: Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 26] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.2.1. Example and Listing: XMP, LISTING The and elements are similar to the element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
tag followed by a newline character should produce only one line break, not a line break plus a blank line. * The horizontal tab character (code position 9 in the HTML document character set) must be interpreted as the smallest positive nonzero number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Documents should not contain tab characters, as they are not supported consistently. Example of use:
Line 1. Line 2 is to the right of line 1. abc Line 3 aligns with line 2. def
element, but they have a different syntax. Their content is declared as CDATA, which means that no markup except the end-tag open delimiter-in- context is recognized (see 9.6 "Delimiter Recognition" of [SGML]). NOTE - In a previous draft of the HTML specification, the syntax of and elements allowed closing tags to be treated as data characters, as long as the tag name was not or , respectively. Since CDATA declared content has a number of unfortunate interactions with processing techniques and tends to be used and implemented inconsistently, HTML documents should not contain nor elements -- the tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
tag is more expressive and more consistently supported. The element should be rendered so that at least 132 characters fit on a line. The element should be rendered so that at least 80 characters fit on a line but is otherwise identical to the element. NOTE - In a previous draft, HTML included a element that is similar to the element, except that there is no closing tag: all characters after the start-tag are data. 5.5.3. Address: ADDRESS The element contains such information as address, signature and authorship, often at the beginning or end of the body of a document. Typically, the element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented. Example of use: Newsletter editor J.R. Brown JimquickPost News, Jimquick, CT 01234 Tel (123) 456 7890 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 27] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.5.4. Block Quote: BLOCKQUOTE The element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
element contains text quoted from another source. A typical rendering might be a slight extra left and right indent, and/or italic font. The typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
typically provides space above and below the quote. Single-font rendition may reflect the quotation style of Internet mail by putting a vertical line of graphic characters, such as the greater than symbol (>), in the left margin. Example of use: I think the play ends Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered. but I am not sure. 5.6. List Elements HTML includes a number of list elements. They may be used in combination; for example, a may be nested in an element of a . The COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used. 5.6.1. Unordered List: UL, LI The represents a list of items -- typically rendered as a bulleted list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: First list item Second list item second paragraph of second item Third list item 5.6.2. Ordered List: OL The element represents an ordered list of items, sorted by sequence or order of importance. It is typically rendered as a Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 28] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 numbered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. For example: Click the Web button to open URI window. Enter the URI number in the text field of the Open URI window. The Web document you specified is displayed. substep 1 substep 2 Click highlighted text to move from one link to another. 5.6.3. Directory List: DIR The element is similar to the element. It represents a list of short items, typically up to 20 characters each. Items in a directory list may be arranged in columns, typically 24 characters wide. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: A-HI-M M-RS-Z 5.6.4. Menu List: MENU The element is a list of items with typically one line per item. The menu list style is typically more compact than the style of an unordered list. The content of a element is a sequence of elements. Nested block elements are not allowed in the content of elements. For example: First item in the list. Second item in the list. Third item in the list. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 29] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.6.5. Definition List: DL, DT, DD A definition list is a list of terms and corresponding definitions. Definition lists are typically formatted with the term flush-left and the definition, formatted paragraph style, indented after the term. The content of a element is a sequence of elements and/or elements, usually in pairs. Multiple may be paired with a single element. Documents should not contain multiple consecutive elements. Example of use: TermThis is the definition of the first term. TermThis is the definition of the second term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (typically one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column. The optional COMPACT attribute suggests that a compact rendering be used, because the list items are small and/or the entire list is large. Unless the COMPACT attribute is present, an HTML user agent may leave white space between successive DT, DD pairs. The COMPACT attribute may also reduce the width of the left-hand (DT) column. TermThis is the first definition in compact format. TermThis is the second definition in compact format. 5.7. Phrase Markup Phrases may be marked up according to idiomatic usage, typographic appearance, or for use as hyperlink anchors. User agents must render highlighted phrases distinctly from plain text. Additionally, content must be rendered as distinct from content, and content must rendered as distinct from content. Phrase elements may be nested within the content of other phrase elements; however, HTML user agents may render nested phrase elements Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 30] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 indistinctly from non-nested elements: plain bold italic may be rendered the same as plain bold italic 5.7.1. Idiomatic Elements Phrases may be marked up to indicate certain idioms. NOTE - User agents may support the element, not included in this specification, as it has been deployed to some extent. It is used to indicate the defining instance of a term, and it is typically rendered in italic or bold italic. 5.7.1.1. Citation: CITE The element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example: He just couldn't get enough of The Grapes of Wrath. 5.7.1.2. Code: CODE The element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
Soft you now, the fair Ophelia. Nymph, in thy orisons, be all my sins remembered.
second paragraph of second item
element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
block structuring element (5.5.2, "Preformatted Text: PRE") is more appropriate for multiple-line listings. For example: The expression x += 1 is short for x = x + 1. 5.7.1.3. Emphasis: EM The element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example: A singular subject always takes a singular verb. 5.7.1.4. Keyboard: KBD The element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example: Enter FIND IT to search the database. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 31] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.1.5. Sample: SAMP The element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example: The only word containing the letters mt is dreamt. 5.7.1.6. Strong Emphasis: STRONG The element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example: STOP, or I'll say "STOP" again! 5.7.1.7. Variable: VAR The element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic. For example: Type html-check file | more to check file for markup errors. 5.7.2. Typographic Elements Typographic elements are used to specify the format of marked text. Typical renderings for idiomatic elements may vary between user agents. If a specific rendering is necessary -- for example, when referring to a specific text attribute as in "The italic parts are mandatory" -- a typographic element can be used to ensure that the intended typography is used where possible. NOTE - User agents may support some typographic elements not included in this specification, as they have been deployed to some extent. The element indicates horizontal line through the characters, and the element indicates an underline. 5.7.2.1. Bold: B The element indicates bold text. Where bold typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.2.2. Italic: I The element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 32] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 5.7.2.3. Teletype: TT The element indicates teletype (monospaced )text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used. 5.7.3. Anchor: A The element indicates a hyperlink anchor (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). At least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present. Attributes of the element: HREF gives the URI of the head anchor of a hyperlink. NAME gives the name of the anchor, and makes it available as a head of a hyperlink. TITLE suggests a title for the destination resource -- advisory only. The TITLE attribute may be used: * for display prior to accessing the destination resource, for example, as a margin note or on a small box while the mouse is over the anchor, or while the document is being loaded; * for resources that do not include a title, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus, for use as a window title. REL The REL attribute gives the relationship(s) described by the hyperlink. The value is a whitespace separated list of relationship names. The semantics of link relationships are not specified in this document. REV same as the REL attribute, but the semantics of the relationship are in the reverse direction. A link from A to B with REL="X" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with REV="X". An anchor may have both REL and REV attributes. URN specifies a preferred, more persistent identifier for the head anchor of the hyperlink. The syntax and Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 33] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 semantics of the URN attribute are not yet specified. METHODS specifies methods to be used in accessing the destination, as a whitespace-separated list of names. The set of applicable names is a function of the scheme of the URI in the HREF attribute. For similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon. 5.8. Line Break: BR The element specifies a line break between words (see 6, "Characters, Words, and Paragraphs"). For example: Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The element is a divider between sections of text; typically a full width horizontal rule or equivalent graphic. For example: February 8, 1995, CERN 5.10. Image: IMG The element refers to an image or icon via a hyperlink (see 7.3, "Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources"). HTML user agents may process the value of the ALT attribute as an alternative to processing the image resource indicated by the SRC attribute. NOTE - Some HTML user agents can process graphics linked via anchors, but not graphics. If a graphic is essential, it should be referenced from an element rather than an element. If the graphic is not essential, then the element is appropriate. Attributes of the element: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 34] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ALIGN alignment of the image with respect to the text baseline. * `TOP' specifies that the top of the image aligns with the tallest item on the line containing the image. * `MIDDLE' specifies that the center of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. * `BOTTOM' specifies that the bottom of the image aligns with the baseline of the line containing the image. ALT text to use in place of the referenced image resource, for example due to processing constraints or user preference. ISMAP indicates an image map (see 7.6, "Image Maps"). SRC specifies the URI of the image resource. NOTE - In practice, the media types of image resources are limited to a few raster graphic formats: typically `image/gif', `image/jpeg'. In particular, `text/html' resources are not intended to be used as image resources. Examples of use: Be sure to read these instructions. 6. Characters, Words, and Paragraphs An HTML user agent should present the body of an HTML document as a collection of typeset paragraphs and preformatted text. Except for preformatted elements (, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
x += 1
x = x + 1
Pease porridge hot Pease porridge cold Pease porridge in the pot Nine days old. 5.9. Horizontal Rule: HR The
, , , ), each block structuring element is regarded as a paragraph by taking the Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 35] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 data characters in its content and the content of its descendant elements, concatenating them, and splitting the result into words, separated by space, tab, or record end characters (and perhaps hyphen characters). The sequence of words is typeset as a paragraph by breaking it into lines. 6.1. The HTML Document Character Set The document character set specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML" must be supported by HTML user agents. It includes the graphic characters of Latin Alphabet No. 1, or simply Latin-1. Latin-1 comprises 191 graphic characters, including the alphabets of most Western European languages. NOTE - Use of the non-breaking space and soft hyphen indicator characters is discouraged because support for them is not widely deployed. NOTE - To support non-western writing systems, a larger character repertoire will be specified in a future version of HTML. The document character set will be [ISO-10646], or some subset that agrees with [ISO-10646]; in particular, all numeric character references must use code positions assigned by [ISO-10646]. In SGML applications, the use of control characters is limited in order to maximize the chance of successful interchange over heterogeneous networks and operating systems. In the HTML document character set only three control characters are allowed: Horizontal Tab, Carriage Return, and Line Feed (code positions 9, 13, and 10). The HTML DTD references the Added Latin 1 entity set, to allow mnemonic representation of selected Latin 1 characters using only the widely supported ASCII character repertoire. For example: Kurt Gödel was a famous logician and mathematician. See 9.7.2, "ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set" for a table of the "Added Latin 1" entities, and 13, "The HTML Coded Character Set" for a table of the code positions of [ISO 8859-1] and the control characters in the HTML document character set. 7. Hyperlinks In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks. An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate these hyperlinks. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 36] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 A hyperlink is a relationship between two anchors, called the head and the tail of the hyperlink[DEXTER]. Anchors are identified by an anchor address: an absolute Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), optionally followed by a '#' and a sequence of characters called a fragment identifier. For example: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/TheProject.html#z31 In an anchor address, the URI refers to a resource; it may be used in a variety of information retrieval protocols to obtain an entity that represents the resource, such as an HTML document. The fragment identifier, if present, refers to some view on, or portion of the resource. Each of the following markup constructs indicates the tail anchor of a hyperlink or set of hyperlinks: * elements with HREF present. * elements. * elements. * elements with the SRC attribute present. * elements. * elements with `METHOD=GET'. These markup constructs refer to head anchors by a URI, either absolute or relative, or a fragment identifier, or both. In the case of a relative URI, the absolute URI in the address of the head anchor is the result of combining the relative URI with a base absolute URI as in [RELURL]. The base document is taken from the document's element, if present; else, it is determined as in [RELURL]. 7.1. Accessing Resources Once the address of the head anchor is determined, the user agent may obtain a representation of the resource. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the document contains: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 37] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 then the user agent uses the URI `http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource, as in [URL].. 7.2. Activation of Hyperlinks An HTML user agent allows the user to navigate the content of the document and request activation of hyperlinks denoted by elements. HTML user agents should also allow activation of element hyperlinks. To activate a link, the user agent obtains a representation of the resource identified in the address of the head anchor. If the representation is another HTML document, navigation may begin again with this new document. 7.3. Simultaneous Presentation of Image Resources An HTML user agent may activate hyperlinks indicated by and elements concurrently with processing the document; that is, image hyperlinks may be processed without explicit request by the user. Image resources should be embedded in the presentation at the point of the tail anchor, that is the or element. hyperlinks may also be processed without explicit user request; for example, style sheet resources may be processed before or during the processing of the document. 7.4. Fragment Identifiers Any characters following a `#' character in a hypertext address constitute a fragment identifier. In particular, an address of the form `#fragment' refers to an anchor in the same document. The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the representation of the anchor's resource. For `text/html' representations, it refers to the element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier. The matching is case sensitive. The document should have exactly one such element. The user agent should indicate the anchor element, for example by scrolling to and/or highlighting the phrase. For example, if the base URI is `http://host/x/y.html' and the user activated the link denoted by the following markup: See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
See: appendix 1 for more detail on bananas. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 38] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Then the user agent accesses the resource identified by `http://host/x/app1.html'. Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the element whose NAME attribute is `bananas' and begin navigation there. 7.5. Queries and Indexes The element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to [URL] and joined by `+'. For example, if a document contains: and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'. elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" for details. 7.6. Image Maps If the ISMAP attribute is present on an element, the element must be contained in an element with an HREF present. This construct represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image. The user agent computes the head URI by appending `?' and the x and y coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the element. For example, if a document contains: ImageMap Example Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a element may contain a element, or a element may contain lists which contain elements. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms. Form processing is a level 2 feature. 8.1. Form Elements 8.1.1. Form: FORM The element contains a sequence of input elements, along with document structuring elements. The attributes are: ACTION specifies the action URI for the form. The action URI of a form defaults to the base URI of the document (see 7, "Hyperlinks"). METHOD selects a method of accessing the action URI. The set of applicable methods is a function of the scheme of the action URI of the form. See 8.2.2, "Query Forms: METHOD=GET" and 8.2.3, "Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST". ENCTYPE specifies the media type used to encode the name/value pairs for transport, in case the protocol does not itself impose a format. See 8.2.1, "The form-urlencoded Media Type". 8.1.2. Input Field: INPUT The element represents a field for user input. The TYPE attribute discriminates between several variations of fields. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 40] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The element has a number of attributes. The set of applicable attributes depends on the value of the TYPE attribute. 8.1.2.1. Text Field: INPUT TYPE=TEXT The default value of the TYPE attribute is `TEXT', indicating a single line text entry field. (Use the element for multi- line text fields.) Required attributes are: NAME name for the form field corresponding to this element. The optional attributes are: MAXLENGTH constrains the number of characters that can be entered into a text input field. If the value of MAXLENGTH is greater the the value of the SIZE attribute, the field should scroll appropriately. The default number of characters is unlimited. SIZE specifies the amount of display space allocated to this input field according to its type. The default depends on the user agent. VALUE The initial value of the field. For example: Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example: Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example: What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example: Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example: Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
Choose any of these icons: and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, the chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI `http://host/cgi-bin/imagemap?0,0'. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 39] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8. Forms A form is a template for a form data set and an associated method and action URI. A form data set is a sequence of name/value pair fields. The names are specified on the NAME attributes of form input elements, and the values are given initial values by various forms of markup and edited by the user. The resulting form data set is used to access an information service as a function of the action and method. Forms elements can be mixed in with document structuring elements. For example, a
element may contain a
Street Address: Postal City code: Zip Code: 8.1.2.2. Password Field: INPUT TYPE=PASSWORD An element with `TYPE=PASSWORD' is a text field as above, except that the value is obscured as it is entered. (see also: 10, "Security Considerations"). For example:
Name: Password: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 41] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.3. Check Box: INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX An element with `TYPE=CHECKBOX' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents an n-of-many choice field. Required attributes are: NAME symbolic name for the form field corresponding to this element or group of elements. VALUE The portion of the value of the field contributed by this element. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. For example:
What flavors do you like? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate 8.1.2.4. Radio Button: INPUT TYPE=RADIO An element with `TYPE=RADIO' represents a boolean choice. A set of such elements with the same name represents a 1-of-many choice field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required as for check boxes. Optional attributes are: CHECKED indicates that the initial state is on. At all times, exactly one of the radio buttons in a set is checked. If none of the elements of a set of radio buttons specifies `CHECKED', then the user agent must check the first radio button of the set initially. For example:
Which is your favorite? Vanilla Strawberry Chocolate Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 42] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.5. Image Pixel: INPUT TYPE=IMAGE An element with `TYPE=IMAGE' specifies an image resource to display, and allows input of two form fields: the x and y coordinate of a pixel chosen from the image. The names of the fields are the name of the field with `.x' and `.y' appended. `TYPE=IMAGE' implies `TYPE=SUBMIT' processing; that is, when a pixel is chosen, the form as a whole is submitted. The NAME attribute is required as for other input fields. The SRC attribute is required and the ALIGN is optional as for the element (see 5.10, "Image: IMG"). For example:
Choose a point on the map: 8.1.2.6. Hidden Field: INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN An element with `TYPE=HIDDEN' represents a hidden field.The user does not interact with this field; instead, the VALUE attribute specifies the value of the field. The NAME and VALUE attributes are required. For example: 8.1.2.7. Submit Button: INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT An element with `TYPE=SUBMIT' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to submit the form. Optional attributes are: NAME indicates that this element contributes a form field whose value is given by the VALUE attribute. If the NAME attribute is not present, this element does not contribute a form field. VALUE indicates a label for the input (button). You may submit this request internally: or to the external world: Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 43] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 8.1.2.8. Reset Button: INPUT TYPE=RESET An element with `TYPE=RESET' represents an input option, typically a button, that instructs the user agent to reset the form's fields to their initial states. The VALUE attribute, if present, indicates a label for the input (button). When you are finished, you may submit this request: You may clear the form and start over at any time: 8.1.3. Selection: SELECT The element constrains the form field to an enumerated list of values. The values are given in elements. Attributes are: MULTIPLE indicates that more than one option may be included in the value. NAME specifies the name of the form field. SIZE specifies the number of visible items. Select fields of size one are typically pop-down menus, whereas select fields with size greater than one are typically lists. For example: Vanilla Strawberry Rum and Raisin Peach and Orange The initial state has the first option selected, unless a SELECTED attribute is present on any of the elements. 8.1.3.1. Option: OPTION The Option element can only occur within a Select element. It represents one choice, and has the following attributes: SELECTED Indicates that this option is initially selected. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 44] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 VALUE indicates the value to be returned if this option is chosen. The field value defaults to the content of the element. The content of the element is presented to the user to represent the option. It is used as a returned value if the VALUE attribute is not present. 8.1.4. Text Area: TEXTAREA The element represents a multi-line text field. Attributes are: COLS the number of visible columns to display for the text area, in characters. NAME Specifies the name of the form field. ROWS The number of visible rows to display for the text area, in characters. For example: HaL Computer Systems 1315 Dell Avenue Campbell, California 95008 The content of the element is the field's initial value. Typically, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is typically rendered in a fixed-width font. HTML user agents should allow text to extend beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. 8.2. Form Submission An HTML user agent begins processing a form by presenting the document with the fields in their initial state. The user is allowed to modify the fields, constrained by the field type etc. When the user indicates that the form should be submitted (using a submit button or image input), the form data set is processed according to its method, action URI and enctype. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 45] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 When there is only one single-line text input field in a form, the user agent should accept Enter in that field as a request to submit the form. 8.2.1. The form-urlencoded Media Type The default encoding for all forms is `application/x-www-form- urlencoded'. A form data set is represented in this media type as follows: 1. The form field names and values are escaped: space characters are replaced by `+', and then reserved characters are escaped as per [URL]; that is, non-alphanumeric characters are replaced by `%HH', a percent sign and two hexadecimal digits representing the ASCII code of the character. Line breaks, as in multi-line text field values, are represented as CR LF pairs, i.e. `%0D%0A'. 2. The fields are listed in the order they appear in the document with the name separated from the value by `=' and the pairs separated from each other by `&'. Fields with null values may be omitted. In particular, unselected radio buttons and checkboxes should not appear in the encoded data, but hidden fields with VALUE attributes present should. NOTE - The URI from a query form submission can be used in a normal anchor style hyperlink. Unfortunately, the use of the `&' character to separate form fields interacts with its use in SGML attribute values as an entity reference delimiter. For example, the URI `http://host/?x=1&y=2' must be written `'. HTTP server implementors, and in particular, CGI implementors are encouraged to support the use of `;' in place of `&' to save users the trouble of escaping `&' characters this way. 8.2.2. Query Forms: METHOD=GET If the processing of a form is idempotent (i.e. it has no lasting observable effect on the state of the world), then the form method should be `GET'. Many database searches have no visible side-effects and make ideal applications of query forms. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 46] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `GET', the user agent starts with the action URI and appends a `?' and the form data set, in `application/x-www-form-urlencoded' format as above. The user agent then traverses the link to this URI just as if it were an anchor (see 7.2, "Activation of Hyperlinks"). NOTE - The URL encoding may result in very long URIs, which cause some historical HTTP server implementations to exhibit defective behavior. As a result, some HTML forms are written using `METHOD=POST' even though the form submission has no side-effects. 8.2.3. Forms with Side-Effects: METHOD=POST If the service associated with the processing of a form has side effects (for example, modification of a database or subscription to a service), the method should be `POST'. To process a form whose action URL is an HTTP URL and whose method is `POST', the user agent conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the action URI, and a message body of type `application/x-www-form- urlencoded' format as above. The user agent should display the response from the HTTP POST interaction just as it would display the response from an HTTP GET above. 8.2.4. Example Form Submission: Questionnaire Form Consider the following document: Sample of HTML Form Submission Sample Questionnaire Please fill out this questionnaire: Your name: Male Female Number in family: Cities in which you maintain a residence: Kent Miami Other Nickname: Thank you for responding to this questionnaire. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 47] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 The initial state of the form data set is: name "" gender "male" family "" other "" nickname "" Note that the radio input has an initial value, while the checkbox has none. The user might edit the fields and request that the form be submitted. At that point, suppose the values are: name "John Doe" gender "male" family "5" city "kent" city "miami" other "abc\ndefk" nickname "J&D" The user agent then conducts an HTTP POST transaction using the URI `http://www.w3.org/sample'. The message body would be (ignore the line break): Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 48] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 name=John+Doe&gender=male&family=5&city=kent&city=miami& other=abc%0D%0Adef&nickname=J%26D 9. HTML Public Text 9.1. HTML DTD This is the Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language, level 2. ... -- > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 49] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> %ISOlat1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 50] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Heading is preferred to Heading --> ]]> " > #AttVal(Alt)" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 53] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 54] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> ]]> Directory" > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 56] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Menu" > Heading Text ... is preferred to Heading Text ... --> ]]> Form:" %SDASUFF; "Form End." > Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 58] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Select #AttVal(Multiple)" > ]]> ]]> " > [Document is indexed/searchable.]"> Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 60] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ]]> 9.2. Strict HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 61] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ... -- > %html; 9.3. Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the HTML DTD with the `HTML.Forms' entity defined as `IGNORE' rather than `INCLUDE'. Documents which contain elements do not conform to this DTD, and must use the level 2 DTD. ... Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 62] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 -- > %html; 9.4. Strict Level 1 HTML DTD This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD with the `HTML.Recommended' entity defined as `INCLUDE' rather than IGNORE; that is, it refers to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML. ... -- > %html-1; Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 63] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 9.5. SGML Declaration for HTML This is the SGML Declaration for HyperText Markup Language. 9.6. Sample SGML Open Entity Catalog for HTML The SGML standard describes an "entity manager" as the portion or component of an SGML system that maps SGML entities into the actual storage model (e.g., the file system). The standard itself does not Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 65] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 define a particular mapping methodology or notation. To assist the interoperability among various SGML tools and systems, the SGML Open consortium has passed a technical resolution that defines a format for an application-independent entity catalog that maps external identifiers and/or entity names to file names. Each entry in the catalog associates a storage object identifier (such as a file name) with information about the external entity that appears in the SGML document. In addition to entries that associate public identifiers, a catalog entry can associate an entity name with a storage object identifier. For example, the following are possible catalog entries: -- catalog: SGML Open style entity catalog for HTML -- -- $Id: catalog,v 1.3 1995/09/21 23:30:23 connolly Exp $ -- -- Ways to refer to Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//EN" html.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN" html.dtd -- Ways to refer to Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN" html-1.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 2: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN" html-s.dtd -- Ways to refer to Strict Level 1: most general to most specific -- PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN" html-1s.dtd -- ISO latin 1 entity set for HTML -- PUBLIC "ISO 8879-1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN//HTML" ISOlat1\ sgml 9.7. Character Entity Sets The HTML DTD defines the following entities. They represent particular graphic characters which have special meanings in places in the markup, or may not be part of the character set available to Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 66] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 the writer. 9.7.1. Numeric and Special Graphic Entity Set The following table lists each of the characters included from the Numeric and Special Graphic entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from `ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Numeric and Special Graphic//EN'. However, HTML does not include for the entire entity set -- only the entities listed below are included. GLYPH NAME SYNTAX DESCRIPTION < lt < Less than sign > gt > Greater than signn & amp & Ampersand " quot " Double quote sign 9.7.2. ISO Latin 1 Character Entity Set The following public text lists each of the characters specified in the Added Latin 1 entity set, along with its name, syntax for use, and description. This list is derived from ISO Standard 8879:1986//ENTITIES Added Latin 1//EN. HTML includes the entire entity set. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 67] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 68] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 10. Security Considerations Anchors, embedded images, and all other elements which contain URIs as parameters may cause the URI to be dereferenced in response to user input. In this case, the security considerations of [URL] apply. The widely deployed methods for submitting forms requests -- HTTP and SMTP -- provide little assurance of confidentiality. Information providers who request sensitive information via forms -- especially by way of the `PASSWORD' type input field (see 8.1.2, "Input Field: INPUT") -- should be aware and make their users aware of the lack of confidentiality. 11. References [URI] Berners-Lee, T., "Universal Resource Identifiers in WWW: A Unifying Syntax for the Expression of Names and Addresses of Objects on the Network as used in the World- Wide Web", RFC 1630, CERN, June 1994. [URL] Berners-Lee, T., Masinter, L., and M. McCahill, "Uniform Resource Locators (URL)", RFC 1738, CERN, Xerox PARC, University of Minnesota, December 1994. [HTTP] Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and H. Frystyk Nielsen, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.0", Work in Progress, MIT, UC Irvine, CERN, March 1995. [MIME] Borenstein, N., and N. Freed. "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Describing the Format of Internet Message Bodies", RFC 1521, Bellcore, Innosoft, September 1993. [RELURL] Fielding, R., "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", RFC 1808, June 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 69] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 [GOLD90] Goldfarb, C., "The SGML Handbook", Y. Rubinsky, Ed., Oxford University Press, 1990. [DEXTER] Frank Halasz and Mayer Schwartz, "The Dexter Hypertext Reference Model", Communications of the ACM, pp. 30-39, vol. 37 no. 2, Feb 1994. [IMEDIA] Postel, J., "Media Type Registration Procedure", RFC 1590, USC/Information Sciences Institute, March 1994. [IANA] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC 1700, USC/Information Sciecnes Institute, October 1994. [SQ91] SoftQuad. "The SGML Primer", 3rd ed., SoftQuad Inc., 1991. [ISO-646] ISO/IEC 646:1991 Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange [ISO-10646] ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993 Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) -- Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane [ISO-8859-1] ISO 8859. International Standard -- Information Processing -- 8-bit Single-Byte Coded Graphic Character Sets -- Part 1: Latin Alphabet No. 1, ISO 8859-1:1987. [SGML] ISO 8879. Information Processing -- Text and Office Systems - Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 1986. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 70] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 12. Acknowledgments The HTML document type was designed by Tim Berners-Lee at CERN as part of the 1990 World Wide Web project. In 1992, Dan Connolly wrote the HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) and a brief HTML specification. Since 1993, a wide variety of Internet participants have contributed to the evolution of HTML, which has included the addition of in-line images introduced by the NCSA Mosaic software for WWW. Dave Raggett played an important role in deriving the forms material from the HTML+ specification. Dan Connolly and Karen Olson Muldrow rewrote the HTML Specification in 1994. The document was then edited by the HTML working group as a whole, with updates being made by Eric Schieler, Mike Knezovich, and Eric W. Sink at Spyglass, Inc. Finally, Roy Fielding restructured the entire draft into its current form. Special thanks to the many active participants in the HTML working group, too numerous to list individually, without whom there would be no standards process and no standard. That this document approaches its objective of carefully converging a description of current practice and formalization of HTML's relationship to SGML is a tribute to their effort. 12.1. Authors' Addresses Tim Berners-Lee Director, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 253 9670 Fax: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: timbl@w3.org Daniel W. Connolly Research Technical Staff, W3 Consortium MIT Laboratory for Computer Science 545 Technology Square Cambridge, MA 02139, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (617) 258 8682 EMail: connolly@w3.org URI: http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/People/Connolly/ Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 71] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 13. The HTML Coded Character Set This list details the code positions and characters of the HTML document character set, specified in 9.5, "SGML Declaration for HTML". This coded character set is based on [ISO-8859-1]. REFERENCE DESCRIPTION -------------- ----------- - Unused Horizontal tab Line feed - Unused Carriage Return - Unused Space ! Exclamation mark " Quotation mark # Number sign $ Dollar sign % Percent sign & Ampersand ' Apostrophe ( Left parenthesis ) Right parenthesis * Asterisk + Plus sign , Comma - Hyphen . Period (fullstop) / Solidus (slash) 0 - 9 Digits 0-9 : Colon ; Semi-colon < Less than = Equals sign > Greater than ? Question mark @ Commercial at A - Z Letters A-Z [ Left square bracket \ Reverse solidus (backslash) ] Right square bracket ^ Caret _ Horizontal bar (underscore) ` Acute accent a - z Letters a-z { Left curly brace | Vertical bar Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 72] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 } Right curly brace ~ Tilde - Unused Non-breaking Space ¡ Inverted exclamation ¢ Cent sign £ Pound sterling ¤ General currency sign ¥ Yen sign ¦ Broken vertical bar § Section sign ¨ Umlaut (dieresis) © Copyright ª Feminine ordinal « Left angle quote, guillemotleft ¬ Not sign Soft hyphen ® Registered trademark ¯ Macron accent ° Degree sign ± Plus or minus ² Superscript two ³ Superscript three ´ Acute accent µ Micro sign ¶ Paragraph sign · Middle dot ¸ Cedilla ¹ Superscript one º Masculine ordinal » Right angle quote, guillemotright ¼ Fraction one-fourth ½ Fraction one-half ¾ Fraction three-fourths ¿ Inverted question mark À Capital A, grave accent Á Capital A, acute accent  Capital A, circumflex accent à Capital A, tilde Ä Capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark Å Capital A, ring Æ Capital AE dipthong (ligature) Ç Capital C, cedilla È Capital E, grave accent É Capital E, acute accent Ê Capital E, circumflex accent Ë Capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark Ì Capital I, grave accent Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 73] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Í Capital I, acute accent Î Capital I, circumflex accent Ï Capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark Ð Capital Eth, Icelandic Ñ Capital N, tilde Ò Capital O, grave accent Ó Capital O, acute accent Ô Capital O, circumflex accent Õ Capital O, tilde Ö Capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark × Multiply sign Ø Capital O, slash Ù Capital U, grave accent Ú Capital U, acute accent Û Capital U, circumflex accent Ü Capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark Ý Capital Y, acute accent Þ Capital THORN, Icelandic ß Small sharp s, German (sz ligature) à Small a, grave accent á Small a, acute accent â Small a, circumflex accent ã Small a, tilde ä Small a, dieresis or umlaut mark å Small a, ring æ Small ae dipthong (ligature) ç Small c, cedilla è Small e, grave accent é Small e, acute accent ê Small e, circumflex accent ë Small e, dieresis or umlaut mark ì Small i, grave accent í Small i, acute accent î Small i, circumflex accent ï Small i, dieresis or umlaut mark ð Small eth, Icelandic ñ Small n, tilde ò Small o, grave accent ó Small o, acute accent ô Small o, circumflex accent õ Small o, tilde ö Small o, dieresis or umlaut mark ÷ Division sign ø Small o, slash ù Small u, grave accent ú Small u, acute accent û Small u, circumflex accent ü Small u, dieresis or umlaut mark Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 74] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 ý Small y, acute accent þ Small thorn, Icelandic ÿ Small y, dieresis or umlaut mark 14. Proposed Entities The HTML DTD references the "Added Latin 1" entity set, which only supplies named entities for a subset of the non-ASCII characters in [ISO-8859-1], namely the accented characters. The following entities should be supported so that all ISO 8859-1 characters may only be referenced symbolically. The names for these entities are taken from the appendixes of [SGML]. Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 75] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 76] RFC 1866 Hypertext Markup Language - 2.0 November 1995 Berners-Lee & Connolly Standards Track [Page 77]
Please fill out this questionnaire:
Your name:
Male
Female
Number in family:
Cities in which you maintain a residence:
Thank you for responding to this questionnaire.
Text ... is preferred to